Samsung | PS50B550T2R | Samsung PS50B550 User guide

‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻼﺯﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:00 PM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 1‬‬
SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
.SAMSUNG ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء‬،Samsung ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
Customer Care Centre 
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726
Country
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
BN68-01938C-00
BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 2
3/17/2009 7:34:01 PM
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ ‪ (PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﻳَﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳُﺼﺪِﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ”ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ”ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ“ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻜﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) ١٢٣٠٠٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ (SD‬ﻭ ‪) ٣١٥٠٠٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ (HD‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٤١‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻒ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ“ ﻭ“ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ“ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫© ‪ .SamsuNg ElectroNics Co., Ltd ٢٠٠٩‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:01 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪٤ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ‪٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪٧ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٨ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪٨ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٩ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ”‪٩ .................................................................. “TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١٠ ....................................................................‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪٢٣.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪٢٥...........................................................(JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٨........................................................................MP٣‬‬
‫‪٢٩............................................................Using the Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪٣٠.................................................................Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪٣١.......................................................................... Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪٣١..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٣٢......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﱢﻞ )ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ(‪٣٣.......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪٣٣.................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪١١ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪١٢ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٣ .....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪٣٤...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ )‪٣٥.................................................(VESA‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ‪٣٦..............................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ )ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‪٣٦................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ‪٣٧..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٣٧...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٣٨..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪٣٩..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٧ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١٨ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪١٩ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪٢٠ .......................................................(PIP‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٢١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ‪ /‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪٢٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:01 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪AAA‬‬
‫))‪٢ea‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ )‪(٤ea‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ )‪(٢ea‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(PS58B550‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (PS50B550‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ) ‪(٤ea‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(PS50B550‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﱢﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ )ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .PDP‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳ َ‬
‫ُﺤﻈﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪-20° ~ 20°‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:04 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 4‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﺍﻝﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫)‪ TV‬ﻭ ‪ AV1‬ﻭ ‪ AV2‬ﻭ ‪ Component1‬ﻭ ‪ Component2‬ﻭ ‪ PC‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ HDMI١‬ﻭ )‪ HDMI٢ (DVI‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI٣‬ﻭ ‪.(HDMI٤‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ENTERE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺽﻏﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪- VOL +‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ - VOL +‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄ ﻭ ► ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫> ‪< CH‬‬
‫ﺍﺽﻏﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ > ‪ < CH‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(POWER‬‬
‫ﺍﺽﻏﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:07 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 5‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ,‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PC / DVI‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT IN 1, 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( ﻭﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (Y/PB/PR‬ﻟـ‬
‫‪.Component‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺴﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ)ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ RCA‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN 1, 2(DVI), 3, 4‬‬
‫ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑـ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI/DVI‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬‫‪.HDMI IN 2 DVI‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑـ ‪HDMI‬؟‬
‫ ”ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) DVI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻣﻮﺳﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﱠ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﺜﺒﱠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪) HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PC / DVI‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ DVI‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ANT‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) ٢‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭ ‪Component‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠ HDMI/DVI‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٦٠ HDMI/DVI‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪Component‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠i‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠p‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٥٧٦i‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٥٧٦p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠p ١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:11 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 6‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) MEDIA.P‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪) ٢٤‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪) ٢٧‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ((‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SRS Trusurround HD‬‬
‫ﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪:‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٧ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:13 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 7‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.AAA‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ’‪ ‘+‬ﻭ ’–‘ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ؟‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ؟‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻓﺘﺎﻥ؟‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ؟‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻓﺘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWERP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWERP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )> ‪ (< /‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > ‪ < CH‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWERP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWERP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWERP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )> ‪ (< /‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳ ﱠ‬
‫ُﻔﻀﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:15 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 8‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .MENU‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪50 G (G/R‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50 R‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ”‪“TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .TOOLS‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲ ‪ ENTERE / ► / ◄ / ▼ /‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ,(HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩‬‬
‫‪) PIP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٩ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:16 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 9‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺘﻼﺣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Menu Language‬‬
‫‪Thai‬‬
‫‪中文‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Menu Language‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTERE‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ’ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‘ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ )ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTERE‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTERE‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪...‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫‪English :‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٠ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:17 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(٩~٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ← ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ :PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43 / NTSC3.58 /‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ← ‪ :BG / DK / I / M‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) C‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) S‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ►‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲ ﻭ ▼ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(٩ ~ ٠‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺤﺚ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ(‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ ‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪ P٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .P٩٩‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪) S -‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ * ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١١ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:18 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 11‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ) ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪ ،►/◄/▼/‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‪ (c‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ )\( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪ ،►/◄/▼/‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮ ’‪ .‘٠-٠-٠-٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﱢ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ)‪ (c‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪C--‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪10/1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪C45‬‬
‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫‪C-‬‬‫ﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٢ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:20 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪50 G (G/R‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ← ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ /‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪(G/R‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50 R‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺎء ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪ :(G/R‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪ ,(G/R‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Ext‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AV‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟـ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﻏﺎﻣﻖ ‪ /‬ﻏﺎﻣﻖ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﺎﻣﻖ ﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪50 G (G/R‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50 R‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٣ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:21 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 13‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ← ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ / ١‬ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪50 G (G/R‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50 R‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :١٦:٩ ‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪) ٩:١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٤:٣ ‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫)‪ (١٠٨٠p / ١٠٨٠i / ٧٢٠p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Component‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪.(١٠٨٠p / ١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻭ ‪ ٤:٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ . ENTERE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ . ENTERE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ . ENTERE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ (١٠٨٠p / ١٠٨٠i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Component‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ :(١٠٨٠p / ١٠٨٠i‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ►‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ﺃﻭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ . ENTERE‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ P.SIZE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PC‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟـ ‪ ← HDMI‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.(RGB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ TV‬ﻭ ‪ Video‬ﻭ ‪ Component‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ (١٠٨٠i / ٤٨٠i‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪.(١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٤ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:22 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 14‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪TV/AV/Component/HDMI/PC‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤~٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪٤~٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ ٤~١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ً PDP‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ← ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ /‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PC‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫”ﻧﺎﻋﻢ“ ”ﺧﺸﻦ“ ﻭ“ﻣﻮﺿﻊ“ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.DVI-HDMI‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ )ﺧﺸﻦ( ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﺸﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼءﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٥ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:23 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 15‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(WiNdows XP‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ WiNdows‬ﱠ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ WiNdows‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ,‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(.Samsung‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ’‪) ‘Control panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.WiNdows‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Appearance and Themes‬ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ( ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ’‪) ‘Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ’‪) ‘Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠ :‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭُﺟﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ,‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻫﻲ ’‪ ‘٦٠‬ﺃﻭ ’‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‘‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ’ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‘ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ D-Sub‬ﻭ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺫﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪IBM‬‬
‫‪٣٥٠ × ٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫‪٣١٫٤٦٩‬‬
‫‪٣١٫٤٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠٫٠٨٦‬‬
‫‪٧٠٫٠٨٧‬‬
‫‪٢٥٫١٧٥‬‬
‫‪٢٨٫٣٢٢‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪+/-‬‬
‫‪MAC‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪٦٢٤ × ٨٣٢‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠ × ١١٥٢‬‬
‫‪٣٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٩٫٧٢٦‬‬
‫‪٦٨٫٦٨١‬‬
‫‪٦٦٫٦٦٧‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٥٥١‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٦٢‬‬
‫‪٣٠٫٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪٥٧٫٢٨٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/-‬‬
‫‪VESA CVT‬‬
‫‪٥٧٦ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫‪٨٦٤ × ١١٥٢‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٩٦٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٣٥٫٩١٠‬‬
‫‪٥٣٫٧٨٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤٫٧٧٢‬‬
‫‪٥٦٫٤٥٦‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٢٣١‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٩٥٠‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٩٥٩‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٨٥٥‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٧٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٨٥٧‬‬
‫‪٣٢٫٧٥٠‬‬
‫‪٨١٫٧٥٠‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٩٥٫٧٥٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/-‬‬
‫‪VESA DMT‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬‬
‫‪٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬‬
‫‪٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬‬
‫‪٨٦٤ × ١١٥٢‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٩٦٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪٩٠٠ × ١٤٤٠‬‬
‫‪٩٠٠ × ١٤٤٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٥٠ × ١٦٨٠‬‬
‫‪٣١٫٤٦٩‬‬
‫‪٣٧٫٨٦١‬‬
‫‪٣٧٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٣٧٫٨٧٩‬‬
‫‪٤٨٫٠٧٧‬‬
‫‪٤٦٫٨٧٥‬‬
‫‪٤٨٫٣٦٣‬‬
‫‪٥٦٫٤٧٦‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠٢٣‬‬
‫‪٦٧٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٩٫٧٠٢‬‬
‫‪٦٢٫٧٩٥‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٣٫٩٨١‬‬
‫‪٧٩٫٩٧٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧٫٧١٢‬‬
‫‪٥٥٫٩٣٥‬‬
‫‪٧٠٫٦٣٥‬‬
‫‪٦٥٫٢٩٠‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٩٤٠‬‬
‫‪٧٢٫٨٠٩‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٣١٧‬‬
‫‪٧٢٫١٨٨‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠٠٤‬‬
‫‪٧٠٫٠٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٢٩‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٨١٠‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٩٣٤‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠٢٠‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٢٥‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠١٥‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٨٨٧‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٩٨٤‬‬
‫‪٥٩٫٩٥٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥٫١٧٥‬‬
‫‪٣١٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٣١٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٩٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٨٫٧٥٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٨٣٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٦٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٥٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٨٥٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٦٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٦٫٧٥٠‬‬
‫‪١٤٦٫٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/‬‬‫‪+/-‬‬
‫‪VESA GTF‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪٥٢٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٤٫٦٢٠‬‬
‫‪٧٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‬‫‪١٢٨٫٩٤٣‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪-/-‬‬
‫‪VESA DMT /‬‬
‫‪DTV CEA‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠p × ١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪٦٧٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٫٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٤٨٫٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI/DVI‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ )‪.HDMI IN 2(DVI‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٦ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:24 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪SRS Trusurround HD‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ ﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻴﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻴﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ S.MODE‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ١٠KHz / ٣KHz / ١KHz / ٣٠٠Hz / ١٠٠Hz ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ ← SRS Trusurround HD q‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ SRS Trusurround HD‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Trusurround‬ﻭ ‪ FOCUS‬ﻭ ‪.TruBass‬‬
‫‪ SRS Trusurround HD‬ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ٥٫١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺟﻬﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ ‪) SRS Trusurround HD‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SRS‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ Trusurround HD‬ﻭ ‪ SRS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ Trusurround HD‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﱠﻨﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺚ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ M MUTE ,+‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ –‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪TV / AV / Component / PC / HDMI‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪TV / AV / Component / PC / HDMI‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٧ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:26 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 17‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،PIP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )‪.(PIP‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪: SRS Trusurround HD‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DUAL‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DUAL-I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Mono‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪NICAM Mono +‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪Mono‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪- NICAM‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪Mono‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪١-Dual‬‬
‫‪NICAM Dual-I/II‬‬
‫‪A٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪DUAL-I/II‬‬
‫‪Dual I‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪٢-Dual‬‬
‫‪Mono‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪) Mono‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Dual II‬‬
‫‪Mono‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DUAL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٨ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:27 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 18‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮ ’‪ .‘٠-٠-٠-٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪. .‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫‪English :‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﱢﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮ ’‪.‘٠-٠-٠-٠‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ’‪:‘٠-٠-٠-٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪) POWER‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) POWER ,٤ ,٢ ,٨ ,MMUTE ,‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ PlayStatioNTM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ,XboxTM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ً‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ“ ﻋﻠﻰ“ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ“ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PC‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ً‬
‫‪ q‬ﻟﺤﻦ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.M MUTE‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ –‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ← ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٩ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:28 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 19‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﱠ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ”ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ“ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪English :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫”ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ“ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ← ‪.PIP‬‬
‫‪ ← PIP q‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) PIP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Component1‬ﻭ ‪Component2‬‬
‫‪ TV‬ﻭ ‪ AV1‬ﻭ ‪AV2‬‬
‫‪ HDMI1‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI2/DVI‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI3‬ﻭ ‪HDMI4‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪TV :‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪P1 :‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ← ‪TV / AV1 / AV2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ←‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PC‬ﻭ ‪ ،Component‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ←‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ )‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٠ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:29 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 20‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ً‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪English :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪١٨٠ / ١٥٠ / ١٢٠ / ٩٠ / ٦٠ / ٣٠ /‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ← ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪−− : −−‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪Inactivated‬‬
‫‪Inactivated‬‬
‫‪Inactivated‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ / ١‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ / ٢‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ,‬ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‪ ,‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ,‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ‪ ,‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ”ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢١ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:31 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ‪ /‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ q‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ TV‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.TV, AV1, AV2, Component1, Component2, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2(DVI), HDMI3, HDMI4 ‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪(USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ,(٩~٠‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ < / > P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫‪VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI PC / DVI / TV / IPTV / ‬‬
‫‪Blu-Ray / HD DVD / DMA‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٦٠@١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،(DVI)HDMI IN 2‬ﻳ ﱠ‬
‫ُﻔﻀﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI2/DVI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٢ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:32 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 22‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪ (MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫)‪ (MSC‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ“ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MEDIA.P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ“ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PTP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ‪) MTP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٣٢/FAT١٦‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ NTFS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ“ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ )‪ (MSC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ MSC‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﱠﻊ ﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪MSC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ USB HDD‬ﻭ ‪(.HUB‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ MSC‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ PTP‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ jpeg‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ jpeg‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Media Play MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٤٫١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ’‪ ‘٠٠:٠٠:٠٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٥٠٠٠‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٤٠٠٠‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ DRM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ DRM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٣ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:34 PM‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 23‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .MENU‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪ ،(USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪. ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪MemoRive‬‬
‫‪Memorycard‬‬
‫‪٥٫١٢٫١MB/٩٨٢٫٠MB Free‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MEDIA.P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‪ ،(Photo, Music, Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MEDIA.P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪E Enter e Exit‬‬
‫‪Memorycard‬‬
‫‪٤٩٥٫٠MB Free/٣١٥MB‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪E Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪L Move‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٤ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:34:37 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 24‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪1/3 Page‬‬
‫▶‬
‫‪٣١٥MB/٤٩٥٫٠MB Free‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪L Move‬‬
‫▶‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻭ ◄ ﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Media Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MEDIA.P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ‪ .jpg‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ bmp‬ﺃﻭ ‪.tiff‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ١٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١٥‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Memorycard‬‬
‫‪IMG_0550.JPG‬‬
‫‪IMG_0550...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0344...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0343...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0335...‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪IMG_0572...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0566...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0563...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0557...‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0556‬‬
‫‪IMG_0580...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0579...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0578...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0577...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0576...‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪JaN 18, 2009‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪Memorycard‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Viewing a Slide Show q‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪1/3 Page‬‬
‫▶‬
‫▶‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Start slide Show, Select All‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Start Slide Show‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪.(Slide Show Speed, Background Music, Background Music Setting, List‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪IMG_0550.JPG‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0550‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0344‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0343‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0335‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0572‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0566‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0563‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0557‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0556‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0580‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0579‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0578‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0577‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0576‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪Move E Enter‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪JaN 18, 2009‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Selete All‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٥ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:04 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 25‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed ‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ ,(Fast, Normal, Slow‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Background Music ‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ ,(Off, On‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed Fast‬‬
‫‪BackgrouNd Music‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Nomal‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting ‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ‪ ,Background Music‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪.Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪List ‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed Fast‬‬
‫‪Background Music ON‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Media Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MEDIA.P‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪00:04:05‬‬
‫‪001 SwaN SoNg feat.TBNY.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:06:47‬‬
‫‪002 Beatles-Yesterday.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:11:44‬‬
‫‪003 Fall iN Love.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:03:24‬‬
‫‪004 Tom Waits-Time.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:03:31‬‬
‫‪005 Chuk MaNgioNe-Feel So good.MP3‬‬
‫◄◄‪►► Page 1/2‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫▶‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫▶‬
‫‪1/3 Page‬‬
‫‪E Enter‬‬
‫‪Select U Move‬‬
‫‪IMG_0550.JPG‬‬
‫‪IMG_0550...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0344...‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0343‬‬
‫‪IMG_0335...‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪IMG_0572...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0566...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0563...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0557...‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0556‬‬
‫‪IMG_0580...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0579...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0578...‬‬
‫‪IMG_0577...‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪JaN 18, 2009‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪Memorycard‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪...IMG_0576‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪JaN 1, 2009‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٦ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:19 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 26‬‬
‫‪Using the Option Menu q‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ‪) ..Using the Media Play Menu‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻭ ◄ ﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTERE‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪(Start Slide Show, Zoom, Rotate, List‬‬
‫‪Zoom ‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ,Zoom‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪( ٤ x → ٢ x → ١ x‬‬
‫ ‪ : ١ x‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : ٢ x‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻌﻒ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : ٤ x‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﱠﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻭ ◄ ﻭ ►‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Start Slide Show, Rotate‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rotate ‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : ٠º‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬‫ ‪ : ٩٠º‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ ‪ : ١٨٠º‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ ‪ : ٢٧٠º‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫‪ N‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Start Slide Show, Zoom‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Rotate‬‬
‫► ‪x1‬‬
‫► ‪0º‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪x1‬‬
‫‪x2‬‬
‫‪x4‬‬
‫‪x1‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪90º‬‬
‫‪180º‬‬
‫‪270º‬‬
‫‪x1‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٧ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:20 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 27‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ‪) .Using the Media Play Menu‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ , Music‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Play, Repeat Music‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Select All‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،Media Play‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MEDIA.P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Memorycard‬‬
‫‪512.1MB/982.0MB Free‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫▶‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪E Enter‬‬
‫‪1/3 Page‬‬
‫‪00:04:00‬‬
‫‪Nat KiNg Cole-Fly me to the mooN‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪Folder 1‬‬
‫‪00:04:01‬‬
‫‪001 SwaN SoNg feat.TBNY.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:04:28‬‬
‫‪002 Beatles-Yesterday.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:04:12‬‬
‫‪003 Fall iN Love.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:05:39‬‬
‫‪004 Tom Waits-Time.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:04:30‬‬
‫‪00:05:25‬‬
‫‪5959 KB‬‬
‫‪JaN 14, 2009‬‬
‫‪1/20‬‬
‫‪006 Nat KiNg Cole-Fly me to the mooN.MP3‬‬
‫‪Off ► 007 Ryuichi Sakamoto-RaiN.MP3‬‬
‫‪008 BoN jovi-This aiN’t a love soNg.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:03:54‬‬
‫‪Option R Return‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪VOL‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪VOL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MMUTE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪005 Chuk MaNgioNe-Feel So good.MP3‬‬
‫‪00:04:30‬‬
‫‪Using the Option Menu q‬‬
‫‪L Move‬‬
‫▶‬
‫‪RReturn‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪Select U Move E Enter‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Repeat Music‬‬
‫‪Select All‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪INFO‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ(‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ Repeat Music‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪.On‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ Off‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪Repeat Music‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ STOP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٨ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:31 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 28‬‬
Using the Setup Menu
.‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬،‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
512.1MB/982.0MB Free
Photo
Music
Setup
L Move
Setup
Slide Show Speed
Background Music
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
Screen Saver
Enter
Return
(٢٤ ‫ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬.Using the Media Play Menu ‫ ﻣﻦ‬٢ ‫ ﻭ‬١ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ‬
.١
.ENTERE ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬,Setup ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
.٢
.ENTERE ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬،‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬
Slide Show Speed, Background Music, Background Music Setting, Repeat)
(Music, Screen Saver
.٣
.ENTERE ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬،‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬MEDIA.P‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬،Media Play ‫ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬N
.‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
.٤
Fast
Normal
Slow
: Off
: 10 min.
:
:
Slide Show Speed 
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
.Slow ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Normal ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Fast ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
.‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
U Move
E Enter R Return
Upper Folder
001 SwaN SoNg feat.TBNY.MP3
00:04:05
002 Beatles-Yesterday.MP3
00:06:47
003 Fall iN Love.MP3
00:11:44
004 Tom Waits-Time.MP3
00:03:24
005 Chuk Mangione-Feel So good.MP3
00:03:31
Background Music 
.‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬MP3 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
.‫ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬On ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Off ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
Background Music Setting 
.‫ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬Background Music Setting ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬،‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
.‫ ﻛﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬MP3 ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
Repeat Music 
.‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬MP3 ‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
.On ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Off ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
►► Page 1/2◄◄
Select U Move E Enter
Setup
Slide Show Speed
Background Music
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
ScreeN Saver
: Fast
: ON
Slide Show Speed
Background Music
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
Screen Saver
Screen Saver 
.‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
.‫ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬٢٠ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬١٠ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
: ON Off
: 1 miN.
ON
U Move
Setup
Return
E Enter R Return
: Fast
: ON
: ON
10 min.
:1 miN.
20 min.
1 hour
U Move
E Enter R Return
٢٩ - ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 29
3/17/2009 7:35:37 PM
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ]‪ [HDMI IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ])‪ [HDMI IN 2 (DVI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [HDMI IN 3‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [HDMI IN 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ]‪ [HDMI IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ])‪ [HDMI IN 2 (DVI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [HDMI IN 3‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [HDMI IN 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ .١٫٣ HDMI‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ N‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﺪﺩﺍً ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .AV‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٠ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:39 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 30‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ → )‪.Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.+ Anynet‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ → Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Anynet+‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ)‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ ،Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑـ‬
‫‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ → ﻻ ‪ /‬ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TV‬ﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ,‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪----MENU‬‬
‫‪----INFO‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .TOOLS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTERE‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTERE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ . Anynet+‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،SOURCE‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .Anynet+‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪----MENU‬‬
‫‪----INFO‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪:‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣١ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:43 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 31‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﱢ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫▲‪ENTERE/►/◄/▼/‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ( ‪/‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ =‬
‫‪M MUTE‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ(‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪/‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﱢ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .TOOLS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTERE‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪----MENU‬‬
‫‪ .ENTERE‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪----INFO‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪:‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٢ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:46 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 32‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﱢﻞ )ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .TOOLS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTERE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﱢﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪) PIP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ MTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪----MENU‬‬
‫‪----INFO‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪:‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪“...Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ .Anynet+‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑـ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﱢﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ Video/Audio/HDMI‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .TV‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫)ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٣ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:48 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 33‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) :‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) 6‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪) 8‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪) 4‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪) 5‬ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ )ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻂ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪) 2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪) 3‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪) 0 ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪ .(LIST/FLOF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪،LIST‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ .LIST‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ،List‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪)8‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪) 9 ١١‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 7 ١٢‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،FASTEXT‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٤ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:49 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 34‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.FASTEXT‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺇﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬‫ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(FASTEXT‬‬‫‪ O‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ )‪(VESA‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺑﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ )‪VESA. (A * B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫‪٢٦ ~ ٢٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٠ * ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪M٤‬‬
‫‪٤٠ ~ ٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠ * ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪M٦‬‬
‫‪٥٢ ~ ٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪PDP‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٧٠٠‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪(VESA‬‬
‫‪٧٠ ~ ٥٧‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪~ ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ * ١٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٨ ~ ٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪M٨‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٠ ~ ٦٣‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪~ ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ * ١٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪M٨‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ،VESA‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.VESA‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺭﻑ ‪ VESA‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٥٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻭ ‪ ٦٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .VESA‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٥ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:35:52 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 35‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺏ‪.‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺭﻓﻒ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﻨﱠﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺃ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪SAMSUNG‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﻘﻞ ﻛﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]②[ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺏ(‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ]①[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫)‪(PS٥٠B٥٥٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺰء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(PS٥٨B٥٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٦ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:36:02 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 36‬‬
‫‪주의‬‬
‫‪경고‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻘﻬﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﻢ ﻟﻪ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪주의‬‬
‫‪경고‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﱠﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﱠﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻣﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺴﺒًﺎ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻚ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻢﺳﻢ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10 cm‬‬
‫‪10 10‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10 cm‬‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪10 10‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪10 10‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ cm‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٧ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:36:18 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 37‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ,‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M MUTE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ( ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٨ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:36:18 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 38‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺨﺮﺝ(‬
‫‪PS50B550‬‬
‫‪PS58B550‬‬
‫‪ ٤٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٠ @ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٦٠ @ ٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ × ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ × ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ×ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ×ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧٤ × ٦٦٠ × ١٠٥٥٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٧٤ × ٧٤٨٫٨ × ١٢٢٠٫٨‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣١٦ × ٧٢١ × ١٠٥٥٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣١٦ × ٨١٠ × ١٢٢٠٫٨‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٫١‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣١٫٣‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٧٫٨‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٫٠‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﻣﻦ‪ ١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٪٨٠‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤-‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٪٩٥‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٩ -‬‬
‫‪3/17/2009 7:36:19 PM‬‬
‫‪BN68-01938C-ARA.indb 39‬‬
Download PDF

advertising